2012 Chrysler Town And Country Owner's Guide &

User Manual: 2012-town-&-country

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 652 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Town & Country
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
   
2012 Town & Country
12Y531-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
903751 T&C OM cover.indd 1 3/18/11 7:22 AM
Information Provided by:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use
public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your percep-
tions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judg-
ment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment
that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
Information Provided by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................ 109
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................283
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................421
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 519
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................551
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................603
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 619
10
INDEX
...................................................................629
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵Introduction ........................... 4
䡵How To Use This Manual .................. 4
䡵Warnings And Cautions ................... 6
䡵Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 7
1
Information Provided by:
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
Information Provided by:
INTRODUCTION 5
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears stamped on
the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and
printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label
affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle regis-
tration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
Information Provided by:
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) ............ 12
䡵Sentry Key威.......................... 15
▫Replacement Keys ..................... 16
䡵Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 17
▫Rearming Of The System ................ 17
䡵Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ........... 20
䡵Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 20
▫Using The RKE Transmitter .............. 21
䡵Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 30
▫How To Use Remote Start ............... 30
䡵Door Locks ........................... 34
▫Manual Door Locks ................... 34
▫Power Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 36
䡵Keyless Enter-N-Go ..................... 37
䡵Windows ............................ 41
▫Power Vent Windows — If Equipped ....... 41
▫Power Windows ...................... 42
2
Information Provided by:
䡵Sliding Side Door ...................... 46
▫Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ..... 47
▫Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock ..... 51
䡵Liftgate ............................. 53
▫Power Liftgate — If Equipped ............ 54
䡵Occupant Restraints ..................... 57
▫Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 61
▫Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ..... 67
▫Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped ......................... 68
▫Energy Management Feature ............. 69
▫Seat Belt Pretensioners ................. 69
▫Supplemental Active Head Restraints
(AHR) — If Equipped .................. 70
▫Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 74
▫Seat Belt Lock Out .................... 75
▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 75
▫Seat Belt Extender ..................... 75
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags .............................. 75
▫Air Bag System Components ............. 77
▫Advanced Front Air Bag Features .......... 78
▫Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 81
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 88
▫Child Restraints ...................... 89
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
䡵Commercial Cargo Vehicles (No Factory
Installed Rear Seats) — If Equipped ......... 100
▫Restraining Infants And Small Children In
Commercial Cargo Vehicles ............. 101
䡵Engine Break-In Recommendations ......... 103
䡵Safety Tips .......................... 104
▫Transporting Passengers ............... 104
▫Exhaust Gas ........................ 104
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................ 105
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .................. 107
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Information Provided by:
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
1 — OFF
2 — ACCESSORY
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi-
tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Information Provided by:
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
provides both audible and visible signals, for the first
three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light
will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For an
additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
Rearming Of The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙for
further information).
•For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make
sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
•For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Information Provided by:
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
•Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
•Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙for further informa-
tion).
•Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
•
Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
•
Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙for further infor-
mation).
•
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
•
The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
•
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Information Provided by:
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
•
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
equipped from the factory with three-button RKE trans-
mitters, and those built with power options will be
equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.
Using The RKE Transmitter
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN-
LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.
Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Information Provided by:
Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions
that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate
(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature
(optional). Some features can be programmed to the
customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or
sound horn on LOCK.
Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to
unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the
Illuminated Entry system.
Remote Key Unlock On First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
•
For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform-
ing the following steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key
Fob removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Information Provided by:
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the
PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)
noises of the system.
•
The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is
running.
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If
the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead
console.
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate
does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve-
hicle Security Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Information Provided by:
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve-
hicle Security Alarm.
Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — If
Equipped
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key
Fob removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Information Provided by:
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is approximately three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Separating RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Information Provided by:
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
•
System not disabled from previous remote start event
•
Vehicle theft alarm not active
•
Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
•
Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE:
•
If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Information Provided by:
•
The park lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minutes cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled by pushing the
START/STOP button twice (or the ignition switch
must be cycled to the ON/RUN position).
To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. After the
vehicle is unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, press and
release the START/STOP button (or insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and move it to the ON/RUN
position), otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of
15- minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Remote Start
Active - Key To Run⬙will display in the EVIC until you
insert and turn the key to the ON/RUN position.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Key To Run” will display in the EVIC until you insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN position. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for
further information.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
the START/STOP button.
Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
•
The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
•
Any engine warning lights come on
•
Low Fuel Light turns on
•
The hood is opened
•
The hazard switch is pressed
•
The shift lever is moved out of PARK
•
The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute
cycle
To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Information Provided by:
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote
Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds
after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
When To Reset Remote Start
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start-
ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by cycling
the START/STOP button to the ON/RUN position.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs
on each door trim panel.
If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Sliding Door Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Information Provided by:
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 - Window Open/Close
2 - Power Door Locks
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
door locks (lock or unlock).
On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit
features in accordance with local laws.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
•
If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for an
extended period of time, the Passive Entry feature for
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
Entry feature.
•
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
•
If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door
handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will
automatically lock after 60 seconds.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you the liftgate
handle. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙is programmed
in EVIC, the liftgate will unlock when you cycle the
liftgate handle. For further information, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel”. All doors will remain
locked when the liftgate release handle is pressed regard-
less of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Un-
lock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Information Provided by:
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on
the outside of the handles.
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
NOTE:
•
After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s
door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent
windows from the driver’s seat.
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Information Provided by:
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
depressing the bar switch just below the power window
switches.
Driver’s Power Window Switches
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
Power Window Lockout Switch Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 - Window Open/Close
2 - Power Door Locks
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Information Provided by:
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
The front window switches may be equipped with an
Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting)
after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening
a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The front driver and front passenger switches may be
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single switch on the door handle
assembly.
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-
lowing guidelines:
•
Always open the door smoothly.
•
Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open-
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
the downhill direction.
•
There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
The power sliding door may be opened or
closed manually or by using the buttons on the
RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or
rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside
power sliding door handle will also power open or close
the power sliding door.
NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
closed manually.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Information Provided by:
Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console
for the driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once
will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pressed
while the door is under a power cycle, the door will
reverse direction.
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will operate. If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled and will go into manual
mode.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door
Power Sliding Door Switch
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to
disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen-
gers.
NOTE:
•
The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the
power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and
vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be
pressed.
•
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will automati-
cally reverse to the closed or open position, provided
it meets sufficient resistance.
•
If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it
is fully open and then press the switch again.
•
If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a
clicking sound until the door has no further move-
ment. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling
the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs,
no damage is done to the power sliding door motor.
The power sliding door must be opened or closed
manually.
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Information Provided by:
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for
12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
entering or exiting the vehicle.
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or
disabled by performing the following procedure:
1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five
times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start the
engine).
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZ-
ARD switch ON.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
and handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF side
of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front
overhead console.
When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the
OFF position, the power sliding side door may not be
opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or
activating the inside power sliding door handle.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch
1 — Left Sliding Door 3 — Right Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Information Provided by:
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door
Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
•
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, al-
ways test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
•
When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en-
gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
•
The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the trim panel just in front of the
power sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection
Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional
operation of the power sliding door from the rear
seats, press the ⴖOFF” Master Lock Out Switch lo-
cated in the front overhead console, next to the
driver.
Child Protection Door Lock
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding
door when the Child Protection Door Locks are
engaged.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
•
The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
•
The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
overhead console, or the switches located on the trim
panel just in front of the power sliding door when the
shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock lever
position.
LIFTGATE
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Information Provided by:
To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the button located on the overhead console.
Liftgate Handle Location
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button,
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash
and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing.
Overhead Console Master Power Switch
1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door
2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
•
During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open
or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several
times indicating power operation is in progress.
•
The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
be opened or closed manually.
•
If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
•
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
•
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below ⫺12°F (⫺24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate buttons.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
•
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) that span the front, second, and third row
seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Information Provided by:
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and third row
center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs),
which lock the seat belt webbing into position by
extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting
the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or
secure a large item in a seat
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Information Provided by:
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder
belts.
The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
during very sudden stops or accidents. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Information Provided by:
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Information Provided by:
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions
The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located
in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.
Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of
the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.
Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should
withdraw any slack in the belt.
To release the small latch plate, position the end of the
large latch plate against the red button on the small latch
plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the
headliner.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or
downward to help position the belt away from your
neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the an-
chorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while
simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem-
bly.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or
a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child
restraint system. For additional information refer to
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
under the “Child Restraint” section. The chart below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR N/A ALR
Third Row ALR Cinch ALR
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Information Provided by:
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Information Provided by:
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If
Equipped
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Information Provided by:
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
NOTE:
•
If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
3—
Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Information Provided by:
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert威warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert威can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-
tivating BeltAlert威.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Seat Belt Lock Out
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that
will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can in-
crease the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug, and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Information Provided by:
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Information Provided by:
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Information Provided by:
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should re-
main free from any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Knee Impact Bolster
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve
occupant protection.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on the severity and type of collision.
Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the
risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Information Provided by:
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci-
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of
the air bag.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Information Provided by:
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Information Provided by:
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Information Provided by:
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower An-
chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Information Provided by:
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t
help, move the child to the center rear seating position
and use both the lap and shoulder belt. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Installing The Child Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the
installation instructions that are provided with the child
restraint system.
In general, you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on
the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more
easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchor-
ages and tether anchorages. Then tighten all three straps
as you push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Information Provided by:
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles,
is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH
child restraint anchorage systems are installed on all
second-row seats and in the center position on all third
row fold-in-floor seats. Second-row seats also feature
tether strap anchorages, located in the rear surface of the
seatback. In addition, all third row fold-in-floor seats are
equipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the center
seating position.
NOTE:
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
•
If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,
install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
Installing the Lower Attachments:
1. The vehicle lower anchorages are round bars located
at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraint
attachment straps (reference the child restraint seat in-
structions) to ease the installation.
NOTE: It is recommended to loosen the top tether strap
and route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors so
the top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicle
seat and child restraint.
3. Attach the lower child restraint attachment straps to
the vehicle’s lower anchor bars. Ensure that the lower
attachment strap is firmly engaged and that the hook is
secure.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Information Provided by:
4. Tighten the lower attachment strap while firmly push-
ing the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat. Remove all slack in the lower attachment
straps. Reference the child restraint instructions for infor-
mation on properly removing slack.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
LATCH Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown)
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Installing the Top Tether Strap
(with either Lower Anchors or Vehicle Seat Belt):
1. Route the top tether strap under the adjustable head
restraint between the steel posts.
2. Provide enough slack (reference child restraint in-
structions) for the tether strap to reach the tether anchor
located near the bottom of the seat back.
3. Clip tether hook to tether anchor. Ensure that the hook
is firmly engaged and secure.
4. Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according to
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: The top tether strap is always to be secured,
regardless of if the child restraint is installed with the
lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
(Second Row Anchorage Shown)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle
Seat Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or
a cinching latch plate to secure a Child Restraint System
(CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the
lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint
so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt
from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into
the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
LATCH Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
“Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Seat
Belts in Passenger Seating Positions” section. The chart
below defines the seating positions with an Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
Driver Center Passenger
CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR N/A ALR
Third Row ALR Cinch ALR
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate:
1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate,
first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to route it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Information Provided by:
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES (NO FACTORY
INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight.
WARNING!
NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in
a vehicle without rear seats. In an accident, serious
injury or death may occur from the deploying pas-
senger airbag.
Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forward-
facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
strap.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se-
cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger airbag. In an accident, a passenger airbag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
Restraining Infants And Small Children In
Commercial Cargo Vehicles
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
•
The forward-facing child seat is for children from
about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year
old.
•
A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be
used for children who are too heavy for a rearward-
facing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD
FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE
INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A COMMER-
CIAL CARGO VEHICLE. When a convertible seat is
properly installed facing forward, the vehicle seat
should be adjusted to the rear most position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Information Provided by:
•
Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in
the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt-
positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
rear most position. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat
with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never
allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them
or under their arm.
Tether Installation For Commercial Cargo Vehicles
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower
rear of the front passenger seat.
2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
extended tether strap.
3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
head rest.
4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal
anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tighten the child restraint tether strap.
6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
condition that might affect the performance of the strap is
observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized deal-
ership for a replacement part.
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any
other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor
strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose
threads. If these or any other condition that might
affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO
NOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result.
Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement
part.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Information Provided by:
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Information Provided by:
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Mirrors ............................. 116
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . 116
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 116
▫Outside Mirrors ..................... 117
▫Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped .......................... 118
▫Outside Mirror Folding Feature .......... 118
▫Power Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 118
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 119
▫Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped ........ 120
▫Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped ..... 120
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 120
䡵Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped ....... 121
▫Rear Cross Path ..................... 127
▫Modes Of Operation .................. 128
䡵Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped .......... 129
▫Operation ......................... 132
3
Information Provided by:
▫Phone Call Features .................. 139
▫Uconnect™ Phone Features ............. 142
▫Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 147
▫Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 148
▫General Information .................. 159
䡵Voice Command — If Equipped ........... 159
▫Voice Command System Operation ........ 159
▫Commands ........................ 160
▫Voice Training ...................... 164
䡵Seats .............................. 164
▫Power Seats — If Equipped ............. 165
▫Power Lumbar — If Equipped ........... 167
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 167
▫Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . 170
▫Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped ..... 171
▫Head Restraints ..................... 172
▫Stow ’n Go威Seating — If Equipped ....... 176
▫Quad Seats — If Equipped ............. 183
▫Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped .... 189
▫Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped . . . 191
▫Third Row Power Folding Seat — If
Equipped .......................... 191
▫Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped .......................... 193
▫Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks ....... 196
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
䡵Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ........ 196
▫Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory ................ 197
▫Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) ................... 200
䡵To Open And Close The Hood ............ 201
䡵Lights ............................. 202
▫Interior Lighting ..................... 203
▫Parking Lights ...................... 205
▫Headlights ......................... 205
▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 205
▫Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . 205
▫Headlight Delay — If Equipped .......... 206
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 206
▫Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......... 207
▫Battery Protection .................... 207
▫Multifunction Lever .................. 207
▫Turn Signals ........................ 208
▫High/Low Beam Switch ............... 208
▫Flash-To-Pass ....................... 209
▫Smartbeam™ — If Equipped ............ 209
䡵Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 210
▫Mist, Front Wiper And Washer ........... 211
▫Intermittent, Low And High Speed Wipers . . 211
▫Rear Wiper And Washer ............... 211
▫Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ....... 212
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Information Provided by:
䡵Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .......... 214
䡵Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 215
䡵Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped .......... 216
䡵Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 217
▫To Activate ......................... 218
▫To Set A Desired Speed ................ 219
▫To Deactivate ....................... 219
▫To Resume Speed .................... 219
▫To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 219
▫To Accelerate For Passing .............. 220
䡵Parksense威Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 220
▫Parksense威Sensors ................... 221
▫Parksense威Warning Display ............ 221
▫Parksense威Display ................... 222
▫Enabling/Disabling Parksense威.......... 225
▫Service The Parksense威Rear Park Assist
System ............................ 226
▫Cleaning The Parksense威System ......... 226
▫Parksense威System Usage Precautions ...... 226
䡵Parkview威Rear Back Up Camera — If
Equipped ............................ 229
▫Turning Parkview威On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio ........... 231
▫Turning Parkview威On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio ........... 232
䡵Overhead Consoles .................... 232
▫Front Overhead Console ............... 232
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
▫Courtesy/Interior Lighting ............. 233
▫Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) ...... 233
▫Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If
Equipped .......................... 235
▫Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped .... 235
䡵Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 236
▫Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威........................ 238
▫Programming A Rolling Code ........... 238
▫Programming A Non-Rolling Code ........ 240
▫Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .... 241
▫Using HomeLink威................... 243
▫Security ........................... 243
▫Troubleshooting Tips .................. 244
▫General Information .................. 245
䡵Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 245
▫Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 246
▫Opening The Sunroof — Manual Mode ..... 246
▫Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 246
▫Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 247
▫Pinch Protect Feature ................. 247
▫Pinch Protect Override ................ 247
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 247
▫Sunshade Operation .................. 247
▫Wind Buffeting ...................... 248
▫Sunroof Maintenance ................. 248
▫Ignition Off Operation ................. 248
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Information Provided by:
▫Sunroof Fully Closed .................. 248
䡵Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped ...... 248
䡵Power Inverter — If Equipped ............ 253
䡵Cupholders .......................... 254
▫Instrument Panel Cupholders ............ 254
▫Super Console — If Equipped ........... 255
▫Premium Console Cupholders —
If Equipped ........................ 256
▫Interior Bottle Holders ................ 257
▫Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped ...... 258
䡵Storage ............................. 258
▫Glove Compartments ................. 258
▫Door Trim Panel Storage ............... 259
▫Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped .... 260
▫Umbrella Holder ..................... 260
▫Second Row Floor Storage Bins .......... 261
▫Storage Bin Safety Warning ............. 262
▫Center And Rear Overhead Console
Storage — If Equipped ................ 263
▫Coat Hooks ........................ 264
▫Cargo Area Storage ................... 264
䡵Console Features ...................... 265
▫Basic Console ....................... 265
▫Premium Console — If Equipped ......... 266
▫Super Console — If Equipped ........... 270
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
䡵Cargo Area Features ................... 272
▫Rechargeable Flashlight ................ 272
䡵Rear Window Features .................. 273
▫Rear Window Defroster ................ 273
䡵Rear Load-Leveling System — If Equipped . . . 274
䡵Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped ......... 274
▫Deploying The Crossbars ............... 276
䡵Sun Screens — If Equipped .............. 281
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Information Provided by:
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
Manual Rearview Mirror
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirror Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Driver’s side power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Power Mirror Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Information Provided by:
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en-
abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
NOTE: Pressing the power folding mirror switch for
more than four seconds, or if the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h) will disable the folding feature.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Illuminated Mirror Rear Detection Zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Information Provided by:
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•
The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Sensor Locations BSM Warning Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Information Provided by:
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Information Provided by:
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi-
mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP Detection Zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Information Provided by:
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including radio muting.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
•
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
•
If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re-
quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailable-
Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Information Provided by:
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ“Work” or “Dial” ѧ“248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威“Hands-Free Profile”, Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect™ Phone button and Voice Com-
mand button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Information Provided by:
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an-
other prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威Device”.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice com-
mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re-
member, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
•
When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Information Provided by:
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Information Provided by:
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Information Provided by:
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say “Call”.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the button until you hear a single
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Information Provided by:
mobile phone. Press the button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
press and hold the button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Information Provided by:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•
turned on,
•
paired to the Uconnect™ System,
•
and have network coverage.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance”.
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Information Provided by:
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the button and say, “3746#Send”. Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Information Provided by:
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
When prompted, say “List Phones”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the button and
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Information Provided by:
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
Press the button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
•
press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Information Provided by:
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
•
Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Information Provided by:
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
•
You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, press the button while the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. Iamonmyway
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
sages.
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth威Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Information Provided by:
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Information Provided by:
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Information Provided by:
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE:
If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Information Provided by:
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-
mand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Information Provided by:
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the
following:
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Switch to system setup”
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Main menu setup” or
•
“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command button first and wait for the beep before
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Information Provided by:
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Seat Switch 2 — Seatback Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Information Provided by:
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
Power Lumbar Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located on the switch bank
below the climate controls.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats indepen-
dently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding
side door handle trim panels.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Information Provided by:
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the
recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Manual Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Information Provided by:
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Information Provided by:
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Information Provided by:
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
Stow ’n Go姞Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Push Button
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Second Row Stow ’n Go威
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威seats, the seats
will fold and tumble in one motion.
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the
armrests are raised.
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the
“LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin
latch to open the cover.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Information Provided by:
5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on
the outboard side of the seat.
The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold
automatically during the seat tumble. No additional
actuation is necessary.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble,
And Head Restraint Fold Lever Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy
storage.
Automatic Folding Seatback
Tumbled Second Row Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Information Provided by:
6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
7. Close the storage bin cover.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Seat In Storage Bin
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Unstow Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
mechanism to the “Unlocked” position.
Stow ’n Go威Seat — Folded And Latched Position
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched
position: return the seatback and head restraint to the
upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner
lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest
and seatback and tumble seat forward.
1. Return the seatback to the upright position.
Raising The Seatback
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Information Provided by:
2. Return the head restraint to the upright position.
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble
seat forward.
Easy Entry Second Row
The second row Stow ’n Go威seats allow easy entry to the
third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
Raising The Head Restraint
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble,
And Head Restraint Fold Lever
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The seat will automatically fold into position for easy
entry into the third row.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Quad Seats — If Equipped
Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjuster
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Fold-Flat
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
Easy Entry
The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into
the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position,
lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of
the seat and lift the seat forward.
Fold-Flat Quad Seat
Easy Entry Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Information Provided by:
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the
seatback and accessing the easy entry lever.
To provide additional space behind the second row seats,
the seats can be folded forward.
With the seat in its fold-flat position, pull upward on the
easy-access release lever and lift the seat into the desired
position.
Pull Strap for Third Row Passengers Fold-Flat Release Lever
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Pull out the retainer strap from the sewn-in pocket
located on the base of the seat cushion.
Place the strap around the grab handle located on the
B-Pillar. Before securing the strap, adjust the buckle for
proper fit.
Retainer Strap
B-Pillar Grab Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Information Provided by:
Secure the retainer strap to the inside grab handle located
on the B-Pillar. When not in use, store the strap in the
sewn-in pocket located on the base of the seat cushion.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury:
•
Retainer strap must always be securely attached to
grab handle when seat is folded forward and
vehicle is moving.
•
Never occupy the seat or the center seat behind a
seat that has been folded forward.
Retainer Strap
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Removal
The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is
needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, lift the
cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor
latches.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
removable for added cargo space.
Cross Beam for Seat Removal
Second Row Bench Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Information Provided by:
Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and
moved on its Easy Out威Rollers.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-
tions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstall-
ing these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Release Handles
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort.
Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Information Provided by:
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open to Normal 2 — Stow
3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both
Seats
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
•
To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
•
The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
and press the button again, for the desired position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head
restraint down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Information Provided by:
3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the
seat to lower the seatback.
4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors.
Release Strap “2”
Release Strap “3”
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors
latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
Release Strap “4”
Stowed Third Row Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Information Provided by:
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Tailgate Mode
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, driver’s
outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals,
and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
pressed.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to
each of the memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered
button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
Step 3.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s side-
view mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
Driver Memory Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Information Provided by:
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory
position using the other numbered Memory button or to
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position
1.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position
2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
driver’s mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
selected.
To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will
recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for
the system to complete the memory recall before continu-
ing to Step 3.
3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located
on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling that
you are in the memory set mode.
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will sound
signaling to you that the driver memory has been set.
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will sound
signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been
successfully disabled.
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either Memory
Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features⬙in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Information Provided by:
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available With Memory Seat ONLY)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
the LOCK position.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled through the programmable features in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
panel, below the steering column.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safety
catch lever downward while raising the hood at the same
time.
Hood Release
Safety Catch Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Information Provided by:
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
All of the lights, except the Hazard Warning lights,
headlight high beams and flash-to-pass, are controlled by
switches to the left of the steering column on the instru-
ment panel.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control Assembly
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Interior Lighting
Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is
opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
extreme top.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi-
mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if
one of the following occur:
•
A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
•
Any overhead reading light is left on
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this
feature to operate.
Dimmer Switch
The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight
switch.
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position (extreme
bottom). The interior lights will remain off when the
doors or liftgate are open.
Dimmer Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Information Provided by:
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control for the interior lights on the instrument
panel upward will increase the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent. This
feature brightens the odometer, radio and overhead
displays when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Interior Lights On
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent (extreme top position) to turn on the
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the
dimmer control is in this position.
Halo Lights — If Equipped
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help
to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
locating specific features while driving at night.
The Halo control switch is located to the right of the
dimmer switch.
Halo Switch
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo
switch control upward or downward to in-
crease or decrease the lighting.
Parking Lights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent
to turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all
instrument panel lighting.
Headlights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the second
detent to turn the headlights and parking lights
on. This also turns on all instrument panel
lighting.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the dimmer control up or down.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
position aligning the indicator with AUTO on the head-
light switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time
Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights will
stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition
switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the
headlight switch clockwise to the O (Off) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the Automatic mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Information Provided by:
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or not
remain on. To change the timer setting, see your autho-
rized dealer.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec-
onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-
tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push in the
headlight switch control knob. Pressing the head-
light switch control knob in a second time will turn the
front fog lights off.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or front
fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when
the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After eight
minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK position
and the headlight switch in any position other than OFF
or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until the
next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Information Provided by:
The multifunction lever controls the:
•
Turn Signals
•
Headlight Beams Low/High
•
Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)
•
Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for approximately
1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will
sound to alert the driver.
High/Low Beam Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi-
function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
operation.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO (A) position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to “Mul-
tifunction Lever” in this section for further information.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
SmartBeam™ system.
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Information Provided by:
3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
(A) to the on position.
NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield
or camera lens will cause the system to function
improperly.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
Washer And Wiper Controls
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Mist, Front Wiper And Washer
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward
the steering column) to the first detent and release for a
single wiping cycle. To use the Washer, push on the end
of the lever to the second detent and hold while spray is
desired. If the lever is pushed while on the intermittent
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever
is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Intermittent, Low And High Speed Wipers
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first five detent
positions for intermittent wiper operation, the sixth de-
tent for low wiper operation and the seventh detent for
high wiper operation.
Use one of the five intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 second
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fifth detent).
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-
tent interval.
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the opera-
tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
•
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
•
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind-
shield.
•
Use of Rain-X威or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or
the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph
(0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above
freezing.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the trans-
mission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and
the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless
the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved
or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
•
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Information Provided by:
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
The switch is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjust-
able Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Information Provided by:
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Information Provided by:
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE姞REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ParkSense威will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense威can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
ParkSense姞Sensors
The four ParkSense威sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞Warning Display
The ParkSense威Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Pro-
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Information Provided by:
The ParkSense威Warning Display is located in the Instru-
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ParkSense姞Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
ParkSense威Warning Display
Park Assist System ON
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist System OFF
Slow Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Information Provided by:
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Display Message Park Assist Sys-
tem ON
Warning Object
Detected
Warning Object
Detected
Warning Object
Detected
Warning Object
Detected
Arcs None 3 Solid
(Continuous)
3 Slow
Flashing
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
Radio Mute No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威will MUTE the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威can be enabled and disabled through the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC.
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When ParkSense威is disabled, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Information Provided by:
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-
TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense姞Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist System is mal-
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
will not operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
EVIC after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free
from snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, see your
authorized dealer.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
EVIC, see your authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense姞System
Clean the ParkSense威sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense姞System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威system operat-
ing properly.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
•
When you turn ParkSense威off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense威off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
key.
•
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威is turned off, the EVIC will
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•
ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense威sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
•
Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the EVIC.
•
On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense威is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-
stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist Sys-
tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW姞REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds this note will disappear. The ParkView威camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Information Provided by:
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1 ft-3ft(30cm-1m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威should only
be used as a parking aid. The camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Information Provided by:
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
5. Press the “save” soft-key.
Turning ParkView姞On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incan-
descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-
age and conversation mirror. The premium front over-
head console model features a LED focused light that
illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, two swiv-
eling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversa-
tion mirror, optional power sliding door switches and an
optional power liftgate switch.
NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
above except sunglass storage.
Overhead Console
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (pre-
mium console only). This light is turned on when the
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only)
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, press the door latch to open the
compartment.
Over Door Latch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Information Provided by:
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by
rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing,
positioned for conversation mirror use.
NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the
door can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to
release.
Full Open Position
Conversation Mirror Position
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
Reading Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Information Provided by:
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/
Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink威buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink威channels. The HomeLink威indicator is
located above the center button.
Overhead Compartment Features
1 — DVD
1
5 — Storage
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD
1
3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
1
If equipped, otherwise storage.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: HomeLink威is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink威Buttons/Overhead Consoles HomeLink威Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Information Provided by:
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
•
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink威for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-
ter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink威indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威has received the fre-
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Information Provided by:
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-
ter button.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink威indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威has received the fre-
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威button
and observe the indicator light.
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink威button is
pressed.
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink威buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Information Provided by:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink威indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威button
and observe the indicator light.
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink威button is
pressed.
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink威buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Information Provided by:
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening The Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second, and the sunroof will close automatically from
any position. The sunroof will close fully and then stop
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During
Express Close operation, any movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re-
tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
to move toward the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi-
mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the
lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The
driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected
directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威cigar
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Instrument Panel Outlets
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
Information Provided by:
One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)
shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument
panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed
a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared
between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor
console outlet.
On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power
outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access
the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it
toward the instrument panel.
Removable Console Outlet
Super Console Outlets
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con-
trolled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or
with Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or
with Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts
DC current to AC current, and is located on the left rear
trim panel immediately behind the second row left
passenger seat.
The power inverter switch is located on the instrument
panel below the climate controls.
To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press
the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
Power Inverter Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Information Provided by:
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
CUPHOLDERS
There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All
liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner
from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge
for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument
Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention features.
Super Console — If Equipped
On models equipped with the Super Console, there are
two cupholders located in the center of the console.
Front Cupholders
Super Console Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Information Provided by:
For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the
pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.
Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the
cupholders.
Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped
On models equipped with premium center consoles,
there are four cupholders located on the top of the
console.
Rear Cupholders Premium Console Cupholders
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo-
dates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Interior Bottle Holder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Information Provided by:
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-
modate a second ash receiver, if desired.
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, press in on the button,
located on the left side of the upper door. The door will
automatically open.
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
Upper Compartment
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lower Glove Compartment
To open the lower compartment pull out on the release
handle.
Door Trim Panel Storage
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Lower Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Information Provided by:
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The drivers seatback has a primary storage pocket on all
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into
the left front door entry scuff molding.
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
Umbrella Holder
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
The area below the floor covers, located in front of the
second row seats, is available for storage.
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙unlocked⬙
position to allow greater access to the storage bin.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Information Provided by:
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
•
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
•
Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
•
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed
and latched while the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage — If
Equipped
The overhead storage system comes in several options.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
Overhead Console Features
1 — DVD
1
5 — Storage
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD
1
3 — Courtesy Lights 7 — Courtesy Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
1
If equipped, otherwise storage.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Information Provided by:
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed,4x8foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CONSOLE FEATURES
There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and
Super.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
•
The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
•
Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
•
The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
bin.
•
The basic console is removable from the vehicle for
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at
the console base.
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
3. Remove the console.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Information Provided by:
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
higher than the rear).
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
hook.
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole
is centered on the winch hole.
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down-
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
cover plug.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Premium Console — If Equipped
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
bin offers multiple configurations.
•
Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean-
ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
cups or mugs with handles.
•
Top tray storage
•
Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs
or other items
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
Large console center storage will store headphones for
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other
items
•
12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
•
Rear occupant accessible
•
Multiple adjustments
•
Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
and a convenient storage tray.
Console Position 1
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Information Provided by:
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large
storage area below.
Dual Storage Bins
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Console Position 2
Console Position 3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
To Remove The Premium Floor Console
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
console.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
centimeters.
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console.
To reinstall the console:
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
higher than the front).
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket.
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket.
Console Position 4
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Information Provided by:
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Super Console — If Equipped
The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front
lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin
and rear pull out drawer.
The super console contains a pass through storage area
accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing
down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front
tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door
slides rearward.
Front Lower Pass Through
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through
lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the
instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Located in the back of the super console is a storage
drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.
Super Console
1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
Rear Drawer Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
Information Provided by:
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right side
of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by a lithium battery that
recharges when snapped back into place and the vehicle
is either running or the key is in the accessory position.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Press And Release
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE:
•
You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
•
To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
Three-Press Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
REAR LOAD-LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load-leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the
crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack
does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed the
maximum vehicle load capacity.
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
•
Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or
stowed in the incorrect positions.
•
To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Information Provided by:
Deploying the Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
Loosening Crossbars
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
Stowed Position Deployed Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in
any two of the three deploy positions.
Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align
with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the
crossbars into the deployed positions.
Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Stowing the Crossbars
Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars
are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once
the crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws
completely.
NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars
first, with rail tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplemen-
tary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops.
Tightening Crossbar
Rail Tie Loops
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
Check deployed crossbars frequently and re-
tighten thumb screws as necessary.
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
•
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed.
•
The load should be secured and placed on top of
the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or other protective layer between the load
and the roof surface.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out. Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Sun Screen Retracted
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Information Provided by:
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
Sun Screen Extended
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵Instrument Panel Features ............... 287
䡵Instrument Cluster — Base ............... 288
䡵Instrument Cluster — Premium ........... 289
䡵Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 290
䡵Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped ................... 304
▫Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Displays ..................... 306
▫EVIC White Telltale Lights .............. 309
▫EVIC Amber Telltale Lights ............. 310
▫EVIC Red Telltale Lights ............... 310
▫Oil Change Required .................. 313
▫Fuel Economy ...................... 314
▫Vehicle Speed ....................... 316
▫Trip Info .......................... 316
▫TirePSI ........................... 317
▫Units ............................. 317
▫Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) ......... 317
4
Information Provided by:
▫Messages # ......................... 318
▫Keyless Enter-N-Go Display —
If Equipped ........................ 318
▫Compass / Temperature Display ......... 318
▫Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) ...................... 320
䡵Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
Equipped ............................ 327
▫Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped ................ 328
▫Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped ....... 328
䡵Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) ......... 328
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 328
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 331
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 333
▫Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 336
䡵Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC)................... 337
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 337
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 343
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 345
▫List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 347
▫Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 347
▫Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped .......... 348
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
▫Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped ...................... 352
䡵iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped ..... 352
▫Connecting The iPod威Or External USB
Device ............................ 353
▫Using This Feature ................... 354
▫Controlling The iPod威Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons ............. 354
▫Play Mode ......................... 355
▫List Or Browse Mode ................. 356
▫Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) ........ 358
䡵Uconnect™ Multimedia Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ — If Equipped ............ 359
▫Getting Started ...................... 359
▫Play Video Games .................... 360
▫Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 .... 363
▫Dual Video Screen ................... 365
▫Play A DVD Using The
Touch-Screen Radio ................... 365
▫Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player
(If Equipped) ....................... 368
▫Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
Playing ........................... 370
▫Third Row Swivel Screen (If Equipped) ..... 373
▫Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System ............................ 374
▫Remote Control ..................... 374
▫Remote Control Storage ................ 377
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Information Provided by:
▫Locking The Remote Control ............ 378
▫Replacing The Remote Control Batteries .... 378
▫Headphones Operation ................ 378
▫Controls ........................... 379
▫Replacing The Headphone Batteries ....... 380
▫Unwired威Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty .................... 380
▫System Information ................... 382
䡵Steering Wheel Audio
Controls — If Equipped.................. 395
▫Radio Operation ..................... 396
▫CD Player ......................... 396
䡵CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 397
䡵Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ....... 397
䡵Climate Controls ...................... 398
▫Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System — If Equipped ................. 398
▫Rear Manual Climate Control —
If Equipped ........................ 403
▫Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped ................. 406
▫Summer Operation ................... 417
▫Winter Operation .................... 417
▫Vacation/Storage .................... 418
▫Window Fogging .................... 418
▫Outside Air Intake ................... 418
▫Operating Tips ...................... 419
▫A/C Air Filter ...................... 419
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Vents 5 — Analog Clock 9 — DVD – If Equipped 13 — Ignition Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Upper Glove Compartment 10 — Storage Bin 14 — Hood Release
3 — Shift Lever 7 — Lower Glove Compartment 11 — Cup Holders 15 — Dimmer Switch
4 — Radio 8 — Climate Controls 12 — Switch Bank 16 — Headlight Switch
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator.
2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to
alert you to turn the signal off. If either indicator flashes
at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
5. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
6. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or
L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to
Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering
wheel) to access or reset the display. For further informa-
tion refer to “Compass Mini-Trip Computer”.
Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door .............................Door Ajar
gATE ........................... Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE.....................LowTirePressure
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ...............OilChange Required
LoCOOL ........................LowCoolant
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area
located in the instrument cluster.
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Information Provided by:
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
CHAngE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), perform the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display — If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Information Provided by:
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
•
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
12. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
13. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
14. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
15. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
16. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE:
•
You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.
•
The highest available transmission gear is displayed in
the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Information Provided by:
Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on
the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic
Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
18. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Information Provided by:
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
20. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealership for service.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
21. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
22. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
23. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Information Provided by:
24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera-
ture gauge to pass H, the indicator will continuously
flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine
is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
26. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
During sustained high speed driving or trailer
towing up long grades on hot days, the auto-
matic transmission oil may become too hot.
When the transmission overheat warning light
turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle perfor-
mance until the automatic transmission cools down.
Once the transmission has cooled down and the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally. If the high
speed is maintained, the overheating will continue to
occur.
If the overheating continues, it may become necessary to
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Information Provided by:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
Radio Information
•
Fuel Economy
•
Vehicle Speed
•
Trip Info
•
Tire PSI
•
Vehicle Info
•
Messages
•
Units
•
System Setup (Personal Settings)
•
Turn Menu Off
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
UP Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll up-
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup) and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and sub-
menus.
SELECT Button
The SELECT button allows access to informa-
tion in EVIC submenus, selects some feature
settings, and resets some EVIC features. The
EVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT
button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Information Provided by:
BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line
and outside temperature are displayed.
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom-
eter line.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
•
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙will be displayed in the
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
•
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙(if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙(if driver leaves the vehicle).
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
•
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex-
amples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Un-
available - Not in Park⬙and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Key in ignition
•
Ignition or Accessory On
•
Remote start aborted — Door ajar
•
Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
•
Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
•
Remote start aborted — Fuel low
•
Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
•
Remote start active — Push Start Button
•
Remote start active — Key to Run
•
Wrong Key
•
Damaged Key
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Information Provided by:
•
Key not programmed
•
Vehicle Not in Park
•
Key Left Vehicle
•
Key Not Detected
•
Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
•
Low Tire Pressure
•
Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System” in “Starting And Operating”)
•
Turn Signal On
•
RKE Battery Low
•
Service Keyless System
•
LOW WASHER FLUID
•
Oil Change Required
•
Check Gascap
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
Park Assist Disabled
•
Service Park Assist System
•
Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park
•
Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed
when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind
Spot System has been turned off.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•
Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block-
age, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙con-
ditions. When this message is displayed both outside
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic inter-
ference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the
icon only on the side of interference as long as
interference is present.
•
Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis-
played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is permanently unavailable. The driver will
receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn-
ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If
this message is present see an authorized dealer.
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
•
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Status
The shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating
the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged
and the gear selected is displayed. For further informa-
tion on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”
•
Electronic Speed Control Ready
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ready. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Information Provided by:
•
Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
•
Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
•
Loose Gascap Indicator
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
•
Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
•
Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
•
Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
•
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Information Provided by:
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
•
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
•
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU but-
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Information Provided by:
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do
not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy func-
tions display in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy (AVG)
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
•
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the
prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button. When the
fuel economy is reset, the display will read “zero” for two
seconds. Then, the history information will be erased,
and the averaging will continue from the last fuel aver-
age reading before the reset.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Average Fuel Economy Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Information Provided by:
Vehicle Speed
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC.
Trip Info
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons to
highlight one of the following functions if you want to
reset it:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
selected (highlighted). Press and hold the SELECT button
to clear the resettable function being displayed.
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire
pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
selections below:
•
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
•
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
•
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
•
Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Information Provided by:
Messages #
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
sages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
than one message to step through the remaining stored
messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to
the Main Menu.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch position, current ignition status
will be displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC
display to the right of the odometer value.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for more information.
Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration — If Equipped
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
displayed in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE
NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System
Setup” from the main menu.
Compass Variance Map
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙System
Setup⬙is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then
press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup
sub-menu. Press and release the UP or DOWN button to
select a feature form the following choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français).
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina-
tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Information Provided by:
Auto Unlock Doors
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passen-
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the door mounted switch. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the remote start is activated.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
Horn with Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Flash Lamps with Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Information Provided by:
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “SmartBeam™” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a check-
mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
Headlamps with Wipers
(Available with Auto Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system
reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Flashers with Sliding Door
When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Information Provided by:
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in
a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward
to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Blind Spot Alert
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights”, “Blind Spot Alert
Lights/CHM”, “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spot
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights”
mode, when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature
can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM”
mode, in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blind
Spot Alert Off” is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Turn Menu Off
Press and release SELECT to turn the menu off.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Information Provided by:
Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Media Center 130 (RES)
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Information Provided by:
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Information Provided by:
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Information Provided by:
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Information Provided by:
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Information Provided by:
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Information Provided by:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Information Provided by:
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Information Provided by:
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Information Provided by:
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Information Provided by:
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Information Provided by:
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Information Provided by:
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
This feature allows an iPod威or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart-
ment.
iPod威control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威devices. Some iPod威software versions may
not fully support the iPod威control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威or external USB device support capability.
•
Connecting an iPod威or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威/MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
located in the glove compartment.
USB Connector Port
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
where the iPod威or consumer electronic audio device
cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the glove compartment, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
•
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威contents.
•
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device)
Controlling The iPod姞Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威or external
USB device and display data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Information Provided by:
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 de-
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previ-
ous and next tracks.
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙.IftheRND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
•
During all List modes, the iPod威displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威or
external USB device.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
•
To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufactur-
er’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
music on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIA VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF EQUIPPED
Getting Started
•
Screen(s) located in the overhead console : Unfold the
overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen(s).
Video Entertainment System (VES)™
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Information Provided by:
•
Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
•
Turn on the VES™ player (if equipped on Dual Screen
System) by pushing the Power button, located on the far
left, or by pressing the button on the Remote Control.
•
When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD is
inserted into the VES™ player, the screen(s) turn(s) on
automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and
playback begins.
•
For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1
(second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control
and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer
to the Dual Video Screen section for more information.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks (1 set or 2 depending on vehicle) located on
the back of the center console or on left side behind the
second row seat.
1. Video In – Yellow
2. Left Audio In – White
3. Right Audio In – Red
4. AUX 2 Inputs (If Equipped)
5. Power Outlet
6. Power Inverter
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
1 or 2 (depending which AUX input the gaming console
is plugged into), by either pressing Up/Down/Left/
Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE
button, then press ENTER on the Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Information Provided by:
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch either AUX 1 or
AUX 2 in the VES column (depending which AUX input
is used). To exit press the back arrow soft-key at the top
of the screen.
Rear VES Soft-key
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
AUX 1 In The VES Column
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the
desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE
button on the remote until the desired audio source
appears on the screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Information Provided by:
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Rear VES Soft-key
Select Channel/Screen 2 And
HDD In The MEDIA Column
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™.
•
The Remote Control
•
The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen-
gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch
is on Channel 1.
4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Information Provided by:
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight DISC by
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by re-
peatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
NOTE:
•
Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
•
Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
•
The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key based on the channel you
want to change and then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA
column. To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the
screen.
NOTE:
•
To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
Rear VES Soft-key Select Channel/Screen 1 And
DISC In The MEDIA Column
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Information Provided by:
•
Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
•
Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func-
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn off the remote control screen
functions.
Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player (If Equipped)
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES™
player automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and starts playing the DVD.
NOTE: The VES™ player has basic DVD control func-
tion such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop
2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen-
gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch
is on Channel 1.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight VES DISC by
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by re-
peatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
on the Remote Control.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
•
Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
•
The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select VES DISC Mode On The VES Screen
Rear VES Soft-key
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Information Provided by:
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in
the VES column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at
the top left of the screen.
NOTE:
•
To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
•
Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
Playing
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on
the same channel. If watching a video on Screen 1
(second row), then Channel 2 could be used for audio. If
watching a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Channel 1
could be used for audio.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES Column
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
either the Mode Select Screen will display or a small
banner will appear at the bottom of the screen.
2. To listen to an audio source on Channel 1 or 2, either
press Up/Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to
highlight the desired audio source or press the MODE
button repeatedly until the desired audio source appears
on the screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Information Provided by:
Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 1 while a
video is playing on Channel/Screen 2, touch the 1
soft-key and choose an audio source. To listen to an audio
source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on
Channel/Screen 1, touch the 2 soft-key and choose an
audio source. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at the
top left of the screen.
Rear VES Soft-key
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Third Row Swivel Screen (If Equipped)
•
The third row screen or Screen 2 has the ability to
lower and swivel to face forward.
•
While the swivel screen is facing forward, the second
row screen or Screen 1 must be fully open in order for
the swivel screen (Screen 2) to work.
Select Channel/Screen 2 And
HDD In The MEDIA Column
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Information Provided by:
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
•
VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
and video simultaneously.
•
In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and the right side equates to Channel 2.
•
Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
source will display on the second row screen or Screen
1 and can be heard on Channel 1.
•
Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video
source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2
and can be heard on Channel 2
•
Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
Remote Control
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel button
is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five
seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel
1 (right side of the screen). When the selector switch is in
the Channel 2, position the remote controls the function-
ality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
6. 䉲/ Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
start of the current or previous audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the Station
list, or select playback modes (SCAN/RANDOM for a
CD).
8. 䉴/㥋(Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. 䡲(Stop) – Stops disc play
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
radio. When listening to compressed audio on a data
disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG
Down selects the previous directory. When listening to a
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Information Provided by:
disc in a radio with a multiple-disc changer, PROG Up
selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previ-
ous disc.
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
for the selected channel.
12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual
for details on changing modes.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select the
menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in the
DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected
and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP button to access
the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD Setup Menu of this
manual.)
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s contents.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video chapter.
In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
19. 䉱/ NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compart-
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
The Remote Control Storage
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Information Provided by:
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
•
To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, follow the radio’s instructions (select menu,
rear VES, lock). If the vehicle is not equipped with a
DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to turn
Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s)
indicate when Video Lock is active.
•
Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES™.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-
eration. To replace the batteries:
•
Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
•
Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
•
Replace the battery compartment cover.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
switch..
NOTE:
•
When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
1. Volume Control
2. Power Button
3. Channel Selection Switch
4. Power Indicator
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Information Provided by:
•
When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status on a
popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the
MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the
mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode
Selection menu appears on screen.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate
to the available modes and press the ENTER button to
select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
BACK button on the remote control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
•
Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
•
Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
•
Replace the battery compartment cover.
Unwired姞Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire-
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer-
able.
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace-
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE-
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU-
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired威Do? Unwired威, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired威re-
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR-
RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Information Provided by:
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired威wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired威wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT).
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM),
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
long as it is not in shared mode.
When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES™
have control of the video functions. The VES™ has the
ability to control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
Information Mode Display
1. Channel 1 Mode
2. Channel 1 Shared Status
3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
4. Channel 2 Mode
5. Channel 2 Shared Status
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action
8. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action
9. Clock
10. Video Lock
11. Not Available / Error
12. Disc Changer Status
Information Mode Video Screen Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Information Provided by:
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency,
satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired
digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱,䉲,
䉴,䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote con-
trol’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps
until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons (䉱,䉲) to find the desired station,
Numeric Keypad Menu
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
press the remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that
station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate
to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random
play.
Display Settings
Disc Menu For CDs
Video Screen Display Settings
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
Information Provided by:
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navi-
gation buttons (䉱,䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴,䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
button.
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
•
Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
•
Close the video screen.
•
To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the Mode
Select menu.
•
When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the follow-
ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
•
DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
•
DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
•
Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
•
CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
•
Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
DVD Region Codes
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Information Provided by:
Recorded Discs
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re-
corded) are not supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guide-
lines when recording discs.
•
Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
•
For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
•
For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
supported.
•
The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
•
Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about
burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
•
The DVD player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙or ⬙.MP3⬙and WMA
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙or
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
•
For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
•
Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
•
Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
player will automatically skip the file and begin play-
ing the next available file.
•
If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
•
To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
DVD player’s 䉱button to advance to the next file, or
the 䉲button to return to the start of the current or
previous file.
•
To change the current directory, use the remote con-
trol’s PROG Up and Down buttons.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Information Provided by:
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays
and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
⬙Disc Error⬙message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player
will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping
forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc
is reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of
the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera-
ture is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player will
display ⬙VES High Temp⬙and will shut off the VES™
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shut-
down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player.
Display
Other Language Setup
DVD Player Language Menu
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙setting to
accommodate languages other than Japanese or English.
These languages are selected using a special four-digit code.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these
additional instructions:
•
Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but-
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
and then press the remote control ENTER button.
•
Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
the ⬙Other⬙setting, then press the remote control’s
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
•
Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but-
tons, select a digit for the current position. After
selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
•
When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the language code
is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙*⬙.Ifthe
digits are visible after this step, then the language code
is valid.
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
language codes, please contact the dealer where the
vehicle was purchased.
Language Code Language Code
Dutch 2311 French 1517
German 1304 Italian 1819
Portuguese 2519 Spanish 1418
Rating and Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to
control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most
DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Information Provided by:
them where lower numbers are designated for all audi-
ences and higher numbers are designated for more adult
audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passen-
ger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
DVD Password Entry
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
follow these additional instructions:
•
Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but-
tons, select the Rating tab.
•
Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button.
•
Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
•
After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the set password screen is displayed.
•
Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
•
After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
DVD Player Level Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Information Provided by:
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
follow these additional instructions:
•
Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
buttons, select the Rating tab.
•
Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote
control’s ENTER button.
•
Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set
the value for the current digit, and then press the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
digits.
•
After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
•
Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses other-
wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby威Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙,
⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right re-
served.
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Information Provided by:
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op-
eration in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
function in this mode.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Information Provided by:
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
If Equipped
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
conditions.
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each
front seat occupant can independently control the Heat-
ing, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
When the front control is in any position other than rear,
the front control operates all the rear functions.
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera-
tion. Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the
front control is in the Panel mode. When the front unit is
in Bi-Level mode, airflow will be emitted from both the
upper and lower rear outlets. When the front control is in
Floor, Defrost, or Mix modes, airflow will be directed out
of the rear floor outlets.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
1. Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent tem-
perature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
2. Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the rear system in any mode you select. The rear
blower speed increases as you move the control to the
right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower
speeds. To allow the rear overhead control, turn blower
knob fully to the left, past The ⬙O⬙off position.
3. Front Blower Control
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position. Blower control should be left in the ⬙ON⬙
position to allow the climate control to either warm or
cool the vehicle.
Manual Temperature Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Information Provided by:
4. Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left
for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the
rear cabin.
5. Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
warmer temperature settings.
6. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
7. Front Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor may operate in
Mix and Defrost, or a blend of these modes even if the
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
these modes only when necessary.
8. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
•
To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
9. Recirculation Control Button
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation
mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke,
or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial
start-up in very hot or humid weather.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
If the Recirculation button is pressed when the system
is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will
flash 3 times to indicate Recirculation mode is not
allowed.
•
In Floor and Mix mode the system will turn off
Recirculation mode after five minutes of operation.
You can select Recirculation mode again if desired.
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
•
In order to prevent fogging, when the Recirculation
button is pressed and the mode control is set to Panel,
the A/C will engage automatically.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
10. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Press and release to change the current setting.
The indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
11. Floor Mode Button
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window
demist outlets.
12. Bi-Level Mode Button
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
13. Panel Mode Button
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
temperature.
Max A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and Recirculation
mode buttons at the same time.
Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Information Provided by:
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the
REAR position do the second row seat occupants have
control of the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 – Rear Blower 3 – Rear Mode
2 – Rear Temperature 4 – Rear Climate Control Lock
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
The rear mode selection REAR, allows the settings to be
controlled by the rear mode control knob.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and
the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Information Provided by:
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
•
Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
•
When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
blower operation will be set automatically.
•
The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
•
SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the
cabin, if desired.
The Three-Zone ATC system automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passen-
gers. The system automatically adjusts the air temperature,
the airflow volume, amount of outside air recirculation and
the airflow direction. This maintains a comfortable tem-
perature, even under changing conditions.
Front ATC Panel
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
2. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the left
front seat occupant.
3. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel,
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
4. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
5. Front Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode.
6. Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Auto mode.
7. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
front seat occupant.
8. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
selected.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Up/Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or
the lower button for cooler temperature settings.
10. Rear Control Button
Provides toggle operation between front control screen
and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the
rear climate control screen and allow the front seat
occupants control over the rear climate settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
Information Provided by:
11. Rear Lock
Press and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC
panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls
12. Auto Temperature Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
13. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF.
14. Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed in-
creases as you move the control to the right from the
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
15. Mode Control Button
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, Bi-
Level, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
16. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
17. SYNC Button
Press and release to control the temperature setting for all
three zones from the driver temperature control.
18. Driver Temperature Control Up/Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the
lower button for cooler temperature settings.
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
1. Press ⬙REAR⬙button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
2. To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR button again, or
it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
1. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection.
2. Rear Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear
seat occupants.
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Information Provided by:
3. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC
display, along with two temperatures for the driver and
front passenger. The system will then automatically
regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passen-
ger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
Programmable Features” in this Section.
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by chang-
ing the front blower knob setting
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the temperature doors will continue to operate automati-
cally.
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
Use the outer dial control to regulate
the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control clockwise and decreases
when you move the control counter-
clockwise.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
Blower Control 4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
Information Provided by:
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is
also directed through the side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfort-
able, while keeping the windshield clear.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
blower and temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE:
•
If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. Re-
circulation mode should only be used temporarily. A LED
will illuminate on the Recirculation control button when
Recirculation mode is selected. Push the button a second
time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow
outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if this mode is selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
Information Provided by:
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the
right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC
panel located on the instrument panel.
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display.
The rear temperature and air source are controlled from
the front ATC panel.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 - Blower Speed 3 - Rear Mode
2 - Rear Temperature 4 - Rear Temperature Lock
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
1. Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon
in the rear temperature knob.
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
Programmable Features” in this Section.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the right side trim
panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
front ATC panel.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-
pants.
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
Information Provided by:
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush and snow.
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Operating Tips A/C Air Filter
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con-
trol (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵Starting Procedures .................... 425
▫Automatic Transmission ............... 425
▫Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped ........ 426
▫Normal Starting ..................... 427
▫Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) ............... 429
▫If Engine Fails To Start ................ 429
▫After Starting ....................... 430
䡵Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 431
䡵Automatic Transmission ................. 431
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 432
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 433
▫Fuel Economy (Econ) Mode ............. 433
▫Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ........ 434
▫Gear Ranges ........................ 435
䡵Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 443
▫Acceleration ........................ 443
▫Traction ........................... 443
5
Information Provided by:
䡵Driving Through Water ................. 444
▫Flowing/Rising Water ................. 444
▫Shallow Standing Water ............... 444
䡵Power Steering ....................... 446
▫Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 447
䡵Parking Brake ........................ 447
䡵Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............ 450
▫Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light .......... 451
䡵Electronic Brake Control System ........... 452
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 452
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 453
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......... 454
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) ................ 457
䡵Tire Safety Information ................. 460
▫Tire Markings ....................... 460
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 464
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 465
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 466
䡵Tires — General Information ............. 470
▫Tire Pressure ....................... 470
▫Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 471
▫Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation . . . 472
▫Radial-Ply Tires ..................... 473
▫Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped .............. 473
▫Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ........ 474
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
▫Full Size Spare – If Equipped ............ 475
▫Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ......... 475
▫Tire Spinning ....................... 476
▫Tread Wear Indicators ................. 476
▫Life Of Tire ........................ 477
▫Replacement Tires .................... 478
䡵Tire Chains .......................... 479
䡵Snow Tires .......................... 480
䡵Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 481
䡵Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 482
▫Base System ........................ 485
▫Premium System – If Equipped .......... 487
䡵Fuel Requirements ..................... 491
▫3.6L Engine ........................ 491
▫Reformulated Gasoline ................ 491
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 492
▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 492
▫MMT In Gasoline .................... 493
▫Materials Added To Fuel ............... 493
▫Fuel System Cautions ................. 493
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 494
䡵Flexible Fuel — If Equipped .............. 495
▫E-85 General Information ............... 495
▫Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ................... 496
▫Fuel Requirements ................... 496
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Information Provided by:
▫Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 497
▫Starting ........................... 498
▫Cruising Range ...................... 498
▫Replacement Parts ................... 498
▫Maintenance ........................ 498
䡵Adding Fuel ......................... 499
▫Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 499
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 500
䡵Vehicle Loading ...................... 501
▫Vehicle Certification Label .............. 501
䡵Trailer Towing ........................ 503
▫Common Towing Definitions ............ 504
▫Towing Tips ........................ 516
䡵Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 517
▫Towing This Vehicle
Behind Another Vehicle ................ 517
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter is in the passenger compart-
ment.
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing The Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
button loose.
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Information Provided by:
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot
OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
follow these steps.
•
Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start-
ing” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Information Provided by:
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using Fob With Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Move the shift lever into PARK only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not move the shift lever between PARK, RE-
VERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
•
Before moving the shift lever into any gear, make
sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and once removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
This system prevents the key fob from being removed
unless the shift lever is in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position unless the brakes are applied. To move
the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition
switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehi-
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi-
tions. Press the “econ” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the
ECON mode is engaged.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Information Provided by:
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
•
The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
•
The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to
allow the engine to operate at lower speeds.
•
The torque converter clutch will engage at lower
engine speeds and remain on longer.
•
The engine idle speed will be lower.
•
The overall driving performance will be more conser-
vative.
•
Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (Refer to Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control (described later in this section). Moving the shift
lever to the left or right (–/ +) while in the DRIVE
position will select the highest available transmission
gear, and will display that gear in the instrument cluster
as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Information Provided by:
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade, and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
•
Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
•
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. The engine may be started
in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the trans-
mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (described below) to select a
lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend trans-
mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Information Provided by:
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold tempera-
tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu-
minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gear normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that
gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top
available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
Odometer
Screen Display
123456D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Information Provided by:
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow-
ing conditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
•
the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature,
•
the engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture,
•
vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
•
the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
feature, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will
demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and
out of Overdrive.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
layer of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Information Provided by:
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Information Provided by:
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Information Provided by:
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
Parking Brake
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Information Provided by:
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You may experience the following when the brake system
goes into anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
•
A clicking sound of solenoid valves
•
Brake pedal pulsations
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
WARNING!
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisti-
cated electronic equipment that may be suscep-
tible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled, or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent colli-
sions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moni-
tors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Information Provided by:
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Hill Start Assist (HSA).
These systems complement the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) by optimizing the vehicle braking capability dur-
ing emergency braking maneuvers.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide en-
hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light
flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions,
and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded.
•
The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency brak-
ing maneuvers. The system detects an emergency brak-
ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
•
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions.
•
The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances direc-
tional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
•
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
(Continued)
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on
two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, has been disabled and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When
in the “Partial Off” mode, ESC will operate without
engine torque management. This mode is intended to be
used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Information Provided by:
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
In partial ESC mode, the engine power reduction
feature of ESC is disabled. Therefore, enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is re-
duced.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
Vehicle must be stopped.
•
Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Information Provided by:
•
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
5. Release the clutch pedal.
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times within
20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” should turn on and turn off two times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is dis-
abled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Information Provided by:
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
—⬙R⬙means radial construction
—⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Information Provided by:
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pres-
sure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Information Provided by:
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Information Provided by:
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure.
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted, and
the tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage, at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated, even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Information Provided by:
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature is 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original-equipment information, or an
authorized tire dealer, for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
High-speed driving, with your vehicle at or above
maximum load, is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Information Provided by:
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h),
or for more than 30 seconds continuously, without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gen-
erated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone.
•
Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h), or for more than 30 seconds
continuously, when you are stuck; and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original-equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors, including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
The tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
Information Provided by:
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Please see “Tread Wear
Indicators” and “Tire and Loading Information” placard
for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•
Use chains on P225/65R16 and P235/60R16 tires
only. P225/65R17 tires do not provide adequate
clearance.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
0.5 mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry
pavement.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufac-
turer, if different from the speed recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the
chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest
different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all
chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial)
chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Information Provided by:
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure require-
ments found on the tire placard label located on the
driver’s-side B-pillar.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
to be turned off. The system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard
pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi
(207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This
tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approxi-
mately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire placard pressure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-
age. Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light.”
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
TPMS Telltale Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will display
in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime
will be activated when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure value
(located on the placard label on the driver’s-side B-Pillar).
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressures have been received.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Information Provided by:
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn on.
3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four TPMS Sensors
•
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graph-
ics displaying tire pressures
•
TPMS Telltale Warning Light
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of five
seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) flashing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Information Provided by:
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value. The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extin-
guish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been re-
ceived.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
message is then followed by a graphic display, with --in
place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS
Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message is then followed by a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure
in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on, the
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be displayed, a
chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value in the graphic display.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Information Provided by:
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure
value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is
below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the
following licenses:
United States ...................MRXC4W4MA4
Canada .....................2546A-C4W4MA4
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Information Provided by:
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold driveability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
E-85 Badge
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
•
you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
•
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
•
When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
following start up even if the above recommendations
are followed.
•
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer re-
quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Information Provided by:
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
turn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
•
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is heard.
This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly
tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Information Provided by:
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing-related definitions will as-
sist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so
that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. This type of
hitch is the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Information Provided by:
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with an authorized hitch and trailer manufacturer
or a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing
Hitch (Incorrect)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Information Provided by:
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow, and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS
Class Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Wt. Rating) Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt.
3.6L/Automatic
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,600 lbs
(1 633 kg)*
360 lbs (163 kg)
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 3,350 lbs
(1 519 kg)*
335 lbs (152 kg)
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1 360 kg)*
300 lbs (136 kg)
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Information Provided by:
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side,
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo/luggage or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire Safety Information/Tire
and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Op-
erating” for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a injury collision. Fol-
low these guidelines to make your trailer towing as
safe as possible:
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer
hitch. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer
tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer
weight.)
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Towing Requirements – Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or a
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
connector illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Information Provided by:
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a
lower gear range.
NOTE: Selecting a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Mainte-
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
•
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
•
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed.
•
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
•
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Recreational towing is not allowed.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵Hazard Warning Flashers ................ 521
䡵If Your Engine Overheats ................ 521
䡵Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 522
▫Jack Location ....................... 523
▫Spare Tire Removal ................... 524
▫To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut ..... 524
▫Spare Tire Tools ..................... 526
▫Spare Tire Removal Instructions .......... 528
▫Preparations For Jacking ............... 530
▫Jacking Instructions ................... 531
▫Securing The Spare Tire ................ 536
▫Road Tire Installation ................. 538
䡵Jump-Starting Procedure ................ 540
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 541
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 542
6
Information Provided by:
䡵Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 544
䡵Shift Lever Override ................... 545
䡵Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 547
▫Without The Ignition Key .............. 549
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack
handle, and tools.
Jack And Tool Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
Information Provided by:
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire
drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at
the front of the floor console or under front super console
forward bin liner.
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the
spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following
center console configurations.
Super Console
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare
tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the
console.
Spare Tire Location
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor
console.
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compart-
ment.
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner
Lower Drawer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
Information Provided by:
3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compart-
ment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.
Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console
Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to
access the winch drive nut.
Spare Tire Tools
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as-
sembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/
cover assembly.
Drive Nut Access
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
Assembled T-handle
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
Information Provided by:
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the
center console area.
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place
the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the
cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from
underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a spare
tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle.
Spare Tire And Cover
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
cover assembly from under the vehicle.
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the
wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs
together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to
release it from the wheel.
Pulling Spare Tire
Removing Wheel Spacer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
Information Provided by:
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires – General Information” for information about the
spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange
of the vehicle body.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
Jack Locations
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and is located 6 in (150 mm) from door edge.
NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be
placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle.
Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under
the vehicle.
Rear Jacking Locations Front Jack Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut
tightness is 102 ft lbs (138 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the full-
sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form
a “T” and fit the winch T-handle over the drive nut.
Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism
clicks at least three times.
NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for
instructions on assembling the T-handle.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
back in the stowage compartment.
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
Securing The Spare Tire
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a
T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive nut.
Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops
turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to
allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the
vehicle.
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the com-
pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under the
vehicle.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover assem-
bly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the
wheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the two
retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on
the opposite side.
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly. Failure to
properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
loss of the spare tire and cover assembly, which will
cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle
control.
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned cor-
rectly against the underside of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size flat tire, or any other
full-size tire. Vehicle damage may result.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 102 ft/lbs (138 N·m). If in doubt about the
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
Information Provided by:
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 102 ft/lbs (138 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
Information Provided by:
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then move the shift lever back and forth
between DRIVE and REVERSE. Using minimal accelera-
tor pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, with-
out spinning the wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when starting
off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) to “Partial
Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
Information Provided by:
2. Remove the shift lever override access cover located
near the top right of the shift lever in the instrument
panel.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a small screwdriver or similar small, push and
hold the override release lever forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
•
Transmission in NEUTRAL
•
25 mph (40 km/h)max speed
•
15 miles (24 km) max distance
Wheel lift Rear
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position,
not the LOCK or ACC positions.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed
equipment is not available, and the transmission is
operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
•
The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
•
The towing distance to be traveled must not exceed
15 miles (24 km).
•
The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front
wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equip-
ment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on
the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will
occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front
wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe transmission damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Engine Compartment — 3.6L ............. 553
䡵Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 554
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 554
䡵Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 555
䡵Replacement Parts ..................... 557
䡵Dealer Service ........................ 557
䡵Maintenance Procedures ................. 557
▫Engine Oil ......................... 558
▫Engine Oil Filter ..................... 560
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 561
▫Exhaust System ..................... 562
▫Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 564
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 565
▫Body Lubrication .................... 568
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 568
▫Cooling System ..................... 570
▫Brakes ............................ 575
7
Information Provided by:
▫Automatic Transmission ............... 577
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 579
▫Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . 585
䡵Fuses .............................. 586
▫Totally Integrated Power Module ......... 586
䡵Vehicle Storage ....................... 593
䡵Replacement Bulbs .................... 593
䡵Bulb Replacement ..................... 594
▫High Intensity Discharge Headlamps
(HID) — If Equipped ................. 594
▫Quad Headlamps .................... 595
▫Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp ........... 595
▫Front Side Marker Lamp ............... 596
▫Fog Lamp ......................... 596
▫Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker
And Backup Lamp ................... 597
▫Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) .......................... 598
▫License Lamp ....................... 598
䡵Fluid Capacities ...................... 599
䡵Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ....... 600
▫Engine ............................ 600
▫Chassis ........................... 601
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Air Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Battery 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
Information Provided by:
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight-
ened.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Information Provided by:
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Information Provided by:
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
“Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Information Provided by:
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
Information Provided by:
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer, or other
authorized service facility, using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer-approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as
MOPAR威Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR威All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Information Provided by:
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro-
tection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Information Provided by:
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pres-
sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Information Provided by:
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing the
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service atten-
dant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature
is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked
once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in
the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If
engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents
of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of
the condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
failure.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Information Provided by:
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
The six–speed transmission is equipped with a capped
dipstick tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered
with. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to
ensure that the fluid level is set properly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Information Provided by:
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The six-speed automatic transmission is a sealed unit and
has no dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have the
transmission fluid checked or serviced.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Information Provided by:
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
•
Stone and gravel impact
•
Insects, tree sap and tar
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust the
following MOPAR威wheel cleaners are recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non acidic cleaner.
•
For chrome wheels, use MOPAR威Chrome Cleaner
(Part# 04318013) or equivalent.
•
For aluminum wheels, use MOPAR威Wheel Cleaner
(Part# 04796239AB) or equivalent.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Use only the approved MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaners or equivalent.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean,
damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp
towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Surfaces
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威Total Clean or equiva-
lent, then MOPAR威Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight
and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass head-
lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
Information Provided by:
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any com-
mercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abra-
sive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside
rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the
right rear quarter window equipped with the radio
antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if
the buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
at one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Information Provided by:
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the appli-
cable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A
label that identifies each component may be printed or
embossed on the inside of the cover.
Totally Integrated Power Module
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Totally Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the Integrated
Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
J1 40 Amp
Green
— Power Folding Seat
J2 30 Amp
Pink
— Power Liftgate
Module
J3 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Door Module
J4 25 Amp
Natural
— Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp
Natural
— Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp
Green
— Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
J7 30 Amp
Pink
— Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
J8 40 Amp
Green
— Power Memory
Seat – If Equipped
J9 40 Amp
Green
— Partial Zero Emis-
sions Vehicle Motor/
Flex Fuel – If
Equipped
J10 30 Amp
Pink
— Headlamp Wash/
Manifold Tuning
Valve – If Equipped
J11 30 Amp
Pink
— Power Sliding Door
Module/Anti–Theft
Module – If Equipped
J12 30 Amp
Pink
HVAC Rear Blower,
Radiator Fan Motor
J13 60 Amp
Yellow
— Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Main
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
J14 40 Amp
Green
— Rear Window
Defogger
J15 40 Amp
Green
— Front Blower
J17 40 Amp
Green
— Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp
Blue
— Powertrain Control
Module Trans Range
J19 60 Amp
Yellow
— Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Wiper LO/HI
J21 20 Amp
Blue
— Front/Rear Washer
J22 25 Amp
Natural
— Sunroof Module
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
M1 — 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Center Brake
Lamp/Brake Switch
M2 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Lighting, Front
Fog Lamps, Intelli-
gent Battery Sensor
(IBS)
M3 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Front/Rear Axle
Locker, Vacuum
Pump Motor
M4 — 10 Amp
Red
Trailer Tow
M5 — 25 Amp
Natural
Inverter
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
M6 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #1
(ACC), Rain Sensor,
Cigar Lighter (Instru-
ment Panel or with
Console Rear)
M7 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #2
(BATT/ACC SELECT)
– Center Seat or with
Console Rear
M8 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seat – If
Equipped
M9 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Heated Seat – If
Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
M10 — 15 Amp
Blue
Ignition Off Draw —
Video System, Satel-
lite Radio, DVD,
Hands-Free Module,
Universal Garage
Door Opener, Vanity
Lamp, Streaming
Video Module – If
Equipped
M11 — 10 Amp
Red
Climate Control
System
M12 — 30 Amp
Green
Amplifier/Radio
M13 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Instrument Cluster,
SIREN, Clock Mod-
ule, Multi-Function
Control Switch – If
Equipped
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
M14 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
M15 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear View Mirror,
Instrument Cluster,
Multi-Function Con-
trol Switch, Tire Pres-
sure Monitor, Glow
Plug Module – If
Equipped
M16 — 10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module/
Occupant Classifica-
tion Module
M17 — 15 Amp
Blue
Left Tail/License/
Park Lamp, Running
Lamps
M18 — 15 Amp
Blue
Right Tail/Park/Run
Lamp
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
M19 — 25 Amp
Natural
Powertrain
M20 — 15 Amp
Blue
Instrument Cluster
Interior Light, Switch
Bank, Steering Col-
umn Module, Switch
Steering Wheel
M21 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Powertrain
M22 — 10 Amp
Red
Horn
M23 — 10 Amp
Red
Horn
M24 — 25 Amp
Natural
Rear Wiper
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
M25 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump, Diesel
Lift Pump – If
Equipped
M26 — 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror Switch,
Driver Window
Switch
M27 — 10 Amp
Red
Wireless Control
Module, Keyless
Entry Module
M28 — 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain, Transmis-
sion Control Module
M29 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Classifica-
tion Module
M30 — 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Wiper Module,
Power Folding Mirror
M31 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Back-Up Lamps
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
M32 — 10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module,
THATCHUM – If
Equipped
M33 — 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain
M34 — 10 Amp
Red
Park Assist, Heater
Climate Control Mod-
ule, Headlamp Wash,
Compass, Rear Cam-
era, Door Lamps,
Flashlight, Relay Die-
sel Cabin Heater, Rad
Fan Diesel – If
Equipped
M35 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse Description
M36 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #3 (In-
strument Panel or
with Console Center)
M37 — 10 Amp
Red
Antilock Brakes, Sta-
bility Control, Stop
Lamp, Fuel Pump
M38 — 25 Amp
Natural
Door Lock/Unlock
Motors, Liftgate
Lock/Unlock Motors
The heated mirrors, lower instrument panel power outlet
and removable floor console, when in the front position
are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only service-
able by an authorized dealer. The power seats are fused
by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver’s
seat. The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit
breaker located under the instrument panel near the
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
steering column. If you experience temporary or perma-
nent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for
service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may do the following:
•
Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Totally Inte-
grated Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off
Draw (IOD).
•
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp ................. 578
Center & Rear Reading Lamps ............... 578
Front Door Courtesy Lamp..................578
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped ..... 578
Instrument Cluster Lamps ................. PC74
Liftgate Lamp(s) .........................578
Overhead Console Reading Lamps ..........PC579
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped ........194
Visor Vanity Lamps.................... 6501966
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
Information Provided by:
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb Number
Headlamp – (Low and High Beam Halogen) .....H11
Headlamp (HID – If Equipped) Low Beam ...... D1S
Fog Lamp – If Equipped ...................H11
Front Side Marker ......................W5W
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp ..... PY27/7W or 3757A
Rear Turn Signal Lamp ..................3757A
Rear Tail, Stop, and Side Marker Lamp ........LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup ...............................3157
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp ............ LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License................................ 168
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This dimin-
ishes and becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Quad Headlamps
1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at
the rear of the headlamp housing.
2. Release the two tabs on the side of the connector and
remove the connector from the bulb.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the
headlamp housing.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked
into the headlamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Information Provided by:
Front Side Marker Lamp
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
NOTE: Access is somewhat limited. You may have to
remove the inner fender well or remove the headlamp
housing for bulb replacement.
2. Twist the socket and remove from the headlamp
housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
Fog Lamp
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the
push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air
dam.
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and remove
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb.
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Backup Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar
tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to
disengage the two ball studs.
NOTE:
•
If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
•
The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
dislodging them separately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Information Provided by:
3. Twist the socket and remove it from the lamp assem-
bly.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
bar and above the license plate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull
down on the lamp assembly for removal.
2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place
ensuring the locking tab is secure.
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 20 Gallons 76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Information Provided by:
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for cor-
rect SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威product.
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR威DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威product.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵Maintenance Schedule .................. 604
▫Required Maintenance Intervals .......... 606
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Information Provided by:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
Depending on operating conditions, the message may
appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within
the next 500 miles (805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
604 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF. Checking the oil
level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve
the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only
when the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MIN
mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 605
Information Provided by:
Once A Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and the power steering and add as
needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
•
Open the left and right door (slowly) and inspect for
excessive dirt. If noise exist wipe clean and apply
krytox lube to the door rollers.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
606 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 607
Information Provided by:
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
608 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 609
Information Provided by:
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
610 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 611
Information Provided by:
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
❏Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
612 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 613
Information Provided by:
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
614 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 615
Information Provided by:
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
616 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 617
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 621
▫Prepare For The Appointment ........... 621
▫Prepare A List ...................... 621
▫Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 621
䡵If You Need Assistance ................. 621
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 622
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 622
▫In Mexico Contact .................... 622
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 623
▫Service Contract ..................... 623
䡵Warranty Information .................. 624
䡵MOPAR威Parts ....................... 624
䡵Reporting Safety Defects ................ 624
▫In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 624
▫In Canada ......................... 625
䡵Publication Order Forms ................ 625
9
Information Provided by:
䡵Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................ 627
▫Treadwear ......................... 627
▫Traction Grades ..................... 627
▫Temperature Grades .................. 628
620 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 621
Information Provided by:
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247–9753
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
622 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 623
Information Provided by:
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞PARTS
MOPAR威fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
624 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 625
Information Provided by:
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
626 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 627
Information Provided by:
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
628 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
INDEX
10
Information Provided by:
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........572
Adding Fuel ........................... 499
Adding Washer Fluid ..................... 569
Additives, Fuel ......................... 493
Adjustable Pedals .......................216
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 561
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 565
Air Conditioning ........................398
Air Conditioning Controls .................398
Air Conditioning Filter .................419,566
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............... 565
Air Conditioning System .............398,406,565
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control ........398
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............419
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone ............. 403,414
Air Pressure, Tires ....................... 471
Airbag ..............................75,84
Airbag Deployment ....................... 85
Airbag Light ....................82,88,105,297
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 87
Airbag, Side ........................78,81,84
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........79,81,84
Alarm (Security Alarm) ....................17
Alarm Light ...........................298
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................349
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................293
Anti-Theft System ........................17
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............571,599
Disposal ...........................573
Appearance Care ........................579
Ashtray ...............................258
Assist, Hill Start ........................ 457
Assistance Towing ....................... 143
Auto Down Power Windows ................ 44
Auto Up Power Windows ..................44
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................116
Automatic Door Locks .....................37
630 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Automatic Headlights ....................205
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......... 406
Automatic Transaxle
Selection Of Lubricant ................. 601
Automatic Transmission ................ 431,577
Adding Fluid .......................579
Fluid and Filter Changes ............... 579
Fluid Change ....................... 579
Fluid Level Check ....................579
Fluid Type ......................578,601
Gear Ranges ........................435
Special Additives ..................... 578
B-Pillar Location ........................466
Battery ...............................564
Jump Starting .......................540
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 27
Saving Feature (Protection) .............. 207
Belts, Seat .............................105
Blind Spot Monitoring .................... 121
Body Mechanism Lubrication ............... 568
Brake Assist System ......................453
Brake Control System, Electronic ............. 452
Brake Fluid ............................ 601
Brake System ........................... 575
Fluid Check ........................575
Parking ...........................447
Warning Light ....................... 298
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............433
Brakes ...............................575
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle .......103
Bulb Replacement .......................594
Bulbs, Light .........................107,593
Calibration, Compass .....................319
Camera, Rear ........................... 229
Capacities, Fluid ........................599
10
INDEX 631
Information Provided by:
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..............................499
Oil (Engine) ........................ 560
Power Steering ...................... 447
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .............573
Car Washes ............................580
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..............104,494
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ................... 264
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier ..................... 274
Caution, Exhaust Gas ...................... 57
Cellular Phone ....................... 129,397
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............ 598
Chains, Tire ............................ 479
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 522
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................462
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............295,555
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............104
Checks, Safety ..........................104
Child Restraint ........................ 89,91
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............... 94
Child Safety Locks ........................ 51
Child Seat ..............................93
Clean Air Gasoline .......................491
Cleaning
Wheels ............................581
Climate Control .........................398
Clock .............................329,338
Coat Hook ............................264
Coin Holder ...........................265
Cold Weather Operation ................... 429
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ............. 397
Compact Spare Tire ......................474
Compass ..............................318
Compass Calibration .....................319
Compass Variance .......................319
Computer, Trip/Travel ....................316
632 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Connector
UCI ..............................352
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......352
Conserving Fuel ........................314
Console ..............................265
Console, Floor ..........................265
Console, Overhead ....................... 232
Console, Removable ...................... 269
Contract, Service ........................ 623
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........573
Cooling System .........................570
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............572
Coolant Capacity ..................... 599
Coolant Level ....................570,574
Disposal of Used Coolant ...............573
Drain, Flush, and Refill ................ 571
Inspection ..........................574
Points to Remember ..................574
Pressure Cap ........................ 573
Radiator Cap .......................573
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ....571,599,600
Cupholders .........................254,585
Customer Assistance ..................... 621
Data Recorder, Event ...................... 88
Daytime Running Lights ...................206
Dealer Service .......................... 557
Defroster, Rear Window ...................273
Defroster, Windshield .................. 106,412
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................554
Dimmer Control ........................ 204
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ................579
Oil (Engine) ........................ 558
Power Steering ...................... 447
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................... 547
10
INDEX 633
Information Provided by:
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............573
Engine Oil .........................560
Domelight .............................203
Door Locks ............................. 34
Door Locks, Automatic ....................37
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 236
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ..................443
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ...................... 444
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy ....314
E-85 Fuel .............................495
Economy (Fuel) Mode ....................433
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................118
Electrical Power Outlets ...................248
Electronic Brake Control System ............. 452
Brake Assist System ...................453
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 217
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 454
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) ....................... 229,304
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher ...............521
Jacking .........................522,531
Jump Starting .......................540
Overheating ........................521
Emission Control System Maintenance .........555
Engine
Air Cleaner .........................561
Block Heater ........................431
Break-In Recommendations ............. 103
Checking Oil Level ................... 558
Compartment .......................553
Compartment Identification .............553
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................600
Cooling ...........................570
634 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Exhaust Gas Caution ............. 57,104,494
Fails to Start ........................ 429
Flooded, Starting .....................429
Fuel Requirements .................491,599
Oil .........................558,599,600
Oil Change Interval ...................559
Oil Disposal ........................560
Oil Filler Cap .......................560
Oil Filter Disposal .................... 560
Oil Selection ..................... 559,599
Oil Synthetic ........................ 560
Overheating ........................521
Starting ...........................425
Temperature Gauge ...................300
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........85
Entry System, Illuminated ..................20
Ethanol ...............................492
Event Data Recorder ...................... 88
Exhaust Gas Caution ................57,104,494
Exhaust System ...................... 104,562
Extender, Seat Belt ........................75
Exterior Folding Mirrors ...................118
Exterior Lights ..........................107
Fabric Care ............................ 582
Filler Location Fuel ......................297
Filters
Air Cleaner .........................561
Air Conditioning .................. 419,566
Engine Oil .......................560,600
Engine Oil Disposal ...................560
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 209
Flashers
Hazard Warning .....................521
Turn Signal ......................107,290
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ......................498
Engine Oil .........................497
10
INDEX 635
Information Provided by:
Fuel Requirements .................495,496
Maintenance ........................498
Replacement Parts ....................498
Starting ...........................498
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 429
Floor Console ..........................265
Fluid Capacities .........................599
Fluid Leaks ............................107
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................579
Brake .............................575
Power Steering ...................... 447
Fluids ................................600
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 600
Fog Light Service ........................596
Fog Lights ....................... 207,290,596
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating ........... 176
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................... 544
Fuel .................................491
Adding ...........................499
Additives ..........................493
Clean Air .......................... 491
Conserving .........................314
Economy Mode ......................433
Ethanol ...........................492
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............297,499
Filler Door (Gas Cap) .................. 297
Gasoline ...........................491
Gauge ............................297
Light ..........................301,310
Materials Added ..................... 493
Methanol ..........................492
Octane Rating ....................... 600
Requirements ....................491,599
Saver Mode ........................ 314
Tank Capacity ....................... 599
Fuel Optimizer .........................314
636 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Fuel Saver .............................314
Fuel, Flexible ........................... 495
Fueling ...............................499
Fuses ................................586
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ........... 236
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............499,500,554
Gasoline (Fuel) ......................... 491
Conserving .........................314
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................491
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................491
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .................. 300
Fuel ..............................297
Speedometer ........................297
Tachometer ......................... 290
Gear Ranges ........................... 435
Gear Select Lever Override .................545
General Information ...............16,29,159,490
Glass Cleaning .......................... 584
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............... 501,504
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............. 501,504
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) ............. 129
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ...................... 444
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................521
Head Restraints ......................... 172
Headlights ............................205
Cleaning ...........................583
Lights On Reminder .................. 206
Passing ............................209
Time Delay .........................206
Washers ........................... 205
Heated Mirrors ......................... 119
Heated Seats ...........................167
Heater ...............................398
10
INDEX 637
Information Provided by:
Heater, Engine Block .....................431
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 208
Hill Start Assist ......................... 457
Hitches
Trailer Towing ....................... 508
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 236
Hood Release ..........................201
Hook, Coat ............................264
Ignition ...............................13
Key .............................12,13
Ignition Key Removal ..................... 13
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 15
Infant Restraint .......................... 90
Information Center, Vehicle .................304
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 116
Instrument Cluster .................... 288,290
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 287
Instrument Panel Cover ...................582
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 584
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............586
Interior Appearance Care .................. 582
Interior Lights .......................203,204
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ...........................523
Jack Operation ..........................522
Jump Starting .......................... 540
Key-In Reminder ......................... 14
Key, Programming ........................ 16
Key, Replacement ........................ 16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go .................37,318,426
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keyless Go ..........................12,318
Keys .................................12
638 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Lane Change Assist ......................208
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................... 61
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) .......94
Latches ...............................107
Hood .............................201
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 491
Leaks, Fluid ...........................107
Life of Tires ............................477
Liftgate ................................53
Light Bulbs ............................107
Lights .............................107,202
Airbag .....................82,88,105,297
Alarm ............................298
Anti-Lock ..........................293
Automatic Headlights ................. 205
Back-Up ...........................597
Battery Saver .......................207
Brake Assist Warning ..................456
Brake Warning ...................... 298
Bulb Replacement .................593,594
Center Mounted Stop .................. 598
Daytime Running ....................206
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............. 204
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 456
Engine Temperature Warning ............ 302
Exterior ...........................107
Fog .........................207,290,596
Hazard Warning Flasher ...............521
Headlight Switch ..................... 205
Headlights On Reminder ............... 206
High Beam Indicator .................. 290
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............ 208
Illuminated Entry .....................20
Interior .........................203,204
License ............................598
Lights On Reminder .................. 206
Low Fuel ....................... 301,310
10
INDEX 639
Information Provided by:
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ...... 295
Oil Pressure ........................ 301
Park ...........................205,595
Passing ............................209
Reading ...........................233
Rear Servicing ....................... 597
Rear Tail ...........................597
Seat Belt Reminder ...................300
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............ 298
Service .........................593,594
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) ................ 295
Side Marker .....................596,597
SmartBeams ........................209
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ............ 298
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ......... 293
Traction Control ..................... 456
Turn Signal ...................107,595,597
Voltage ............................301
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 290
Load Leveling System ....................274
Loading Vehicle ................... 264,501,503
Capacities ..........................503
Tires .............................. 466
Locks
Automatic Door ...................... 37
Door ..............................34
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) .......................94
Lubrication, Body .......................568
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) .................274
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 564
Maintenance Procedures ................... 557
Maintenance Schedule ....................604
Maintenance, Sunroof ..................... 248
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 295,555
Manual, Service .........................625
640 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Map/Reading Lights .....................233
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) .............196
Memory Seat ........................119,196
Methanol .............................492
Mini-Trip Computer ......................316
Mirrors ...............................116
Automatic Dimming ..................116
Electric Remote ...................... 118
Exterior Folding ..................... 118
Heated ............................119
Memory ...........................196
Outside ...........................117
Rearview ..........................116
Vanity ............................ 120
Mode
Fuel Saver .........................314
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............482
Mopar Parts ......................... 557,624
MTBE/ETBE ...........................492
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 207
Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) .......... 229
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 103
Occupant Restraints ...................57,81,85
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ...........78,79,81,84
Odometer .............................290
Oil Change Indicator ................ 292,293,313
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ........... 292,293,313
Oil, Engine ......................... 558,600
Capacity ...........................599
Change Interval ..................... 559
Checking ..........................558
Disposal ...........................560
Filter ..........................560,600
Filter Disposal .......................560
Identification Logo ................... 559
10
INDEX 641
Information Provided by:
Materials Added to ................... 560
Recommendation ..................559,599
Synthetic ..........................560
Viscosity ........................560,599
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............554,555
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ........... 236
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ............... 116,117
Overhead Console .......................232
Overhead Travel Information Center .......... 232
Overheating, Engine ...................300,521
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,625
Panic Alarm ............................24
Park Sense System, Rear ...................220
Parking Brake .......................... 447
Pedals, Adjustable ....................... 216
Personal Settings ........................320
Pets, Transporting .......................100
Phone, Cellular .........................129
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) .............129
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 466
Power
Door Locks ......................... 36
Lift Gate ...........................54
Mirrors ............................118
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........ 248
Seats .............................165
Sliding Door ......................... 47
Steering ........................446,447
Sunroof ...........................245
Windows ...........................42
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 601
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts .............. 75
Preparation for Jacking .................... 530
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ........................... 69
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 320
642 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Radial Ply Tires ......................... 473
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......570,573
Radio Operation ........................397
Radio Remote Controls .................... 395
Rear Air Conditioning .................403,414
Rear Camera ...........................229
Rear Cross Path ......................... 127
Rear Heater ............................403
Rear Park Sense System ................... 220
Rear Window Defroster ...................273
Rearview Mirrors ........................116
Reclining Front Seats ..................... 171
Recorder, Event Data ...................... 88
Recreational Towing ......................517
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 491
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................74
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................. 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........395
Remote Starting System ....................30
Removable Floor Console .................. 269
Replacement Keys ........................ 16
Replacement Parts ....................... 557
Replacement Tires .......................478
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 624
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ......... 292,293,313
Restraint, Head .........................172
Restraints, Child .......................89,93
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................ 544
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) .................274
Rotation, Tires ..........................481
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................105
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 107
Safety Defects, Reporting .................. 624
Safety Information, Tire ...................460
Safety Tips ............................ 104
Safety, Exhaust Gas ....................57,104
Satellite Radio Antenna ................... 349
10
INDEX 643
Information Provided by:
Schedule, Maintenance ....................604
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 584
Seat Belt Reminder .......................74
Seat Belts ...........................57,105
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ................66
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ...... 66
And Pregnant Women ..................75
Child Restraint ...................89,90,91
Extender ...........................75
Front Seat .......................... 61
Inspection ..........................105
Pretensioners ........................69
Rear Seat ...........................61
Seats .................................164
Adjustment .........................170
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘nGo) .............. 176
Heated ............................167
Memory ...........................196
Power ............................165
Reclining ..........................171
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) ..............176
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................ 17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 571,600
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Sentry Key Programming ................... 16
Sentry Key Replacement ...................16
Service Assistance ....................... 621
Service Contract .........................623
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................295
Service Manuals ........................ 625
Setting the Clock .....................329,338
Settings, Personal ........................320
Shift Lever Override ...................... 545
Short Message Service (SMS) ................151
Shoulder Belts ........................... 61
Side Airbag ............................. 84
Signals, Turn ............. 107,207,208,290,595,597
644 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Sliding Door ............................46
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ............... 443
SmartBeams ...........................209
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................. 479
Snow Tires ............................ 480
Spare Tire .......................474,475,524
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .............. 217
Speedometer ...........................297
Starting ...............................425
Automatic Transmission ................425
Cold Weather .......................429
Engine Fails to Start ..................429
Remote ............................30
Starting and Operating ....................425
Starting Procedures ...................... 425
Steering
Power ..........................446,447
Tilt Column ........................214
Wheel, Heated ...................... 215
Wheel, Tilt ......................... 214
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..............395
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls .........................395
Storage ............................258,593
Storage Bin ............................258
Storage, Vehicle ...................... 418,593
Storing Your Vehicle ...................... 593
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats .............176
Sun Roof .............................. 245
Sunglasses Storage .......................233
Sunroof Maintenance .....................248
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........75
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................... 560
System, Remote Starting .................... 30
Tachometer ............................ 290
Telescoping Steering Column ............... 214
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........406
10
INDEX 645
Information Provided by:
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......300,522
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ............... 94
Text Messaging ......................... 151
Tilt Steering Column .....................214
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......... 466
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............464
Tire Markings .......................... 460
Tire Safety Information ....................460
Tires ...........................107,470,627
Aging (Life of Tires) ..................477
Air Pressure ........................ 470
Chains ............................479
Changing ..........................522
Compact Spare ......................474
General Information ..................470
High Speed .........................472
Inflation Pressures ....................471
Jacking .........................522,531
Life of Tires ........................477
Load Capacity .................... 466,467
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ......... 482
Pressure Warning Light ................293
Quality Grading .....................627
Radial ............................473
Replacement ........................478
Rotation ...........................481
Safety ..........................460,470
Sizes .............................462
Snow Tires ......................... 480
Spare Tire ..........................524
Spinning ...........................476
Tread Wear Indicators .................476
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............510
Towing ............................... 503
24-Hour Towing Assistance .............143
Disabled Vehicle .....................547
Guide .............................509
Recreational ........................517
646 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Weight ............................ 509
Towing Assistance .......................143
Traction Control ......................... 452
Traction Control Switch ...................452
Trailer Towing .......................... 503
Cooling System Tips ..................516
Hitches ............................508
Minimum Requirements ................ 511
Trailer and Tongue Weight ..............510
Wiring ............................514
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 509
Trailer Weight ..........................509
Transaxle
Selection of Lubricant .................601
Transmission ........................... 577
Automatic .......................431,577
Fluid ..........................578,601
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 236
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........ 20
Transporting Pets ........................100
Tread Wear Indicators .................... 476
Trip Odometer .......................... 290
Turn Signals ...................208,290,595,597
UCI Connector .........................352
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ............. 129
Umbrella Holder ........................260
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 627
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 352
Universal Transmitter ..................... 236
Unleaded Gasoline .......................491
Upholstery Care ........................582
Vanity Mirrors .......................... 120
Variance, Compass .......................319
Vehicle Certification Label .................501
10
INDEX 647
Information Provided by:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ................... 467,501,503
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage ....................... 418,593
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 159
Warning Flasher, Hazard ..................521
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............290
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information ..................... 624
Washer
Adding Fluid .......................569
Washing Vehicle .........................580
Water
Driving Through ..................... 444
Wheel and Wheel Trim .................... 581
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................ 581
Wind Buffeting .......................46,248
Window Fogging ........................ 418
Windows ..............................41
Power .............................42
Rear Vent ........................... 41
Windshield Defroster .....................106
Windshield Washers ...................... 569
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................568
Wiper Blade Replacement .................. 568
Zone Control (Temperature Control) ..........398
648 INDEX
Information Provided by:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Information Provided by:
Chrysler Group LLC
12Y531-126-AE 5th Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Information Provided by:

Navigation menu